2000 tl online reference owner's manual...

311
2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features ............................................................................................. 109 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 145 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 159 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 187 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 245 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 253 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 279 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 291 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 297 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Owner's Identification Form Your Vehicle at a Glance .................................................................................................................... 2

Upload: duongnhu

Post on 13-Mar-2018

227 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features ............................................................................................. 109How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 145What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 159The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 187The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 245Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 253This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 279ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 291A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 297How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information SummaryA summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Owner's Identification Form

Your Vehicle at a Glance .................................................................................................................... 2

Page 2: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Owner's Identification

This Owner's Manual should be considereda permanent part of the car, and shouldremain with the car when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in affect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwith out incurring any obligation whatsoever.

OWNER

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE /POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

OWNER'S SIGNATURE

DEALER'S SIGNATURE

knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
knelson
Page 3: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Introduction

Congratulations ! Your selection of a 2000 Acura 3.2 TL was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer's staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. YourAcura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

Page 4: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:• Safety Labels — on the car.• Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don't followinstructions.

• Safety Headings — such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

• Safety Section — such as Driver and Passenger Safety.• Instructions — how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information — please read itcarefully.

DANGER

Magesh
Page 5: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car at a Glance

MIRRORCONTROLS(P.98)

AIRBAGS(P.9, 43)

DIGITAL CLOCK(P. 100)

CLIMATE CONTROL(P.110, 118)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.123)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P. 162)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.148)

FUEL FILL DOORHANDLE(P.147)

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON(P.82)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.95)

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCH(P.77)

Page 6: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car at a Glance

TRACTION CONTROL(P.175)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P.96)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P.64)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.63, 65)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P.65)

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS(P.67)

CRUISE CONTROL(P.69)

HORN(P.62)

TILT ADJUSTMENT(P.68)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER(P.67)

Page 7: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

4

Page 8: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

Important Safety Precautions ........6Your Car's Safety Features ........... 7

Seat Belts ............................ 8Airbags .....................................9Seats & Seat-Backs .....................10Head Restraints .......................10Door Locks 10Pre-Drive Safety Checklist.........11

Protecting Adults .........................121. Close and Lock the Doors......12

2. Adjust the Front Seats..........123. Adjust the Seat-Backs.......... 134. Adjust the Head Restraints.... 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts ................................ 156. Adjust the Steering Wheel..... 177. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position............................. 17Advice for Pregnant Women..... 18Additional Safety Precautions.... 19

Protecting Children.......................20All Children Must Be

Restrained............................ 20Children Should Sit in the Back

Seat........................................... 21The Passenger's Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risksto Children......................... 21

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren................................ 23

If a Child Requires CloseAttention............................. 23

Additional Safety Precautions.... 23General Guidelines for Using

Child Seats........................... 24Protecting Infants......................28

Protecting Small Children...........32Protecting Larger Children........35Using Child Seats with

Tethers...................................39Additional Information About Your

Seat Belts..................................40Seat Belt System Components... 40Lap/Shoulder Belt..................... 40Seat Belt Maintenance.............. 42

Additional Information About YourFront Airbags........................ 43

SRS Components...................... 43How Your Front Airbags

Work...................................43How the SRS Indicator Light

Works................................... 45Additional Information About Your

Side Airbags.......................... 46How Your Side Airbags Work.... 46How The Side Airbag Indicator

Light Works......................... 47Airbag Service........................... 48Additional Safety Precautions..... 48

Carbon Monoxide Hazard..............49Safety Labels.................................50

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 9: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Important Safety Precautions

You'll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Always Wear Your Seat BeltA seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page 15.)

Restrain All ChildrenChildren are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage 20.)

Be Aware of Airbag HazardsWhile airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

9.)

Don't Drink and DriveAlcohol and driving don't mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don't drinkand drive, and don't let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Control Your SpeedExcessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionHaving a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page 192 .)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 10: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car's Safety Features

(4) (1)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Airbags(8) Door Locks(9) Side Airbags

(7)(2)

(3)(8)(9)

(9)(6)

(7)(5)

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; and a collapsible steeringcolumn.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can't take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand always wear your seat beltsproperly. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 11: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car's Safety Features

Seat BeltsFor your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Why Wear Seat BeltsSeat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

When properly worn, seat belts:

• Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thecar's built-in safety features.

• Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

• Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

• Keep you from being thrown outof the car.

• Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 12: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car's Safety Features

Airbags

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

• Airbags do not replace seat belts.They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

• Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

• Airbags can pose serious hazards.To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 13: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car's Safety Features

Seats & Seat-BacksYour car's seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt's effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat'soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

What you should do: Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Head RestraintsHead restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Door LocksKeeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 14: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Car's Safety Features

Pre-Drive Safety ChecklistTo make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car's safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

• All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page15).

• Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page 20).

• Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page 12).

• Seat-backs are upright (see page13).

• Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page 14).

• All doors are closed and locked(see page 12).

• All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page 155).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 15: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

IntroductionThe following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page 35 forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

1.Close and Lock the DoorsAfter everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page 77 for how to lock thedoors.

2.Adjust the Front Seats

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 16: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel while stillmaintaining full control of the car.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page 89 for how to adjust thefront seats.

3.Adjust the Seat-BacksAdjust the driver's seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 17: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant's chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

See page 90 for how to adjust seat-backs.

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant's head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page 91 for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Magesh
Page 18: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

5.Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 19: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, press the release buttonand slide the anchor up or down asneeded (it has four positions).

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back. This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash. No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt. Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourAcura dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page 40 for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 20: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

6.Adjust the Steering Wheel

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page 68 for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

7.Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safely

Magesh
Page 21: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car's airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it's okay for you todrive.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 22: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Adults

Additional Safety Precautions• Two people should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in a

• Do not put any accessories on seatbelts. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

• Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

• Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked "SRS AIRBAG," in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

• Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door. If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

• Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers. If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

Driver and Passenger Safety

crash.

Page 23: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how to properlyprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

All Children Must Be RestrainedEach year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. (See page24.)

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt. (See page35.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 24: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeatAccording to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

The Passenger's Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to ChildrenFront airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger's front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag. Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag canbe hazardous. If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger'sfront air bag. Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page 35 for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 25: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

U.S. ModelsTo remind you of the passenger'sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver's and front passenger'svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Canadian ModelsTo remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver's and front passenger'svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

CAUTIONTO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY:

• FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY PROTECTION INALL TYPES OF CRASHES, YOU MUSTALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETY BELT.

• DO NOT INSTALL REARWARD-FACINGCHILD SEATS IN ANY FRONTPASSENGER SEAT POSITION.

• DO NOT SIT OR LEAN UNNECESSARILYCLOSE TO THE AIR BAG.

• DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECTS OVER THEAIR BAG OR BETWEEN THE AIR BAGAND YOURSELF.

• SEE THE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR FURTHERINFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS.

PRECAUTION:POUR EVITER DES BLESSURES GRAVES:

• POUR PROFITER DUNE PROTECTIONMAXIMALE LORS D'UNE COLLISION BOUCLEZTOUJOURS VOTRE CEINTURE DE SECURITE.

• NINSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIEGE POURENFANTS FAISANT FACE A L ARRIERE SURLE SIEGE DU PASSAGER AVANT.

• NE VOUS APPUYEZ PAS ET NE VOUS ASSEYEZPAS PRES DU COUSSIN GONFLABLE.

• NE DEPOSEZ AUCUN OBJET SUR LE COUSSINGONFLABLE OU ENTRE LE COUSSINGONFLABLE ET VOUS.

• LISEZ LE GUIDE UTILISATEUR POUR DEPLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Children Can Be KILLED or INJUREDby Passenger Air Bag

The back seat is the safest place for children 12 and under.Make sure all children use seat belts or child seats.

WARNING

Page 26: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildrenYour car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

• Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page 35).

• Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page 12).

• Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page 16).

• Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page15).

If a Child Requires CloseAttentionMany parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger's front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Additional Safety Precautions• Use childproof door locks to

prevent children from opening thedoors. Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page 81 ).

• Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows. Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage 96 ).

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 27: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

• Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

General Guidelines for UsingChild SeatsThe following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Selecting a Child SeatTo provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

1. The child seat should meet safetystandards. The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer's statementof compliance on the box and seat.

2. The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant'shead, neck, and back. See page28 for additional information onprotecting infants.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 28: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Small Children: A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page 32 foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

3. The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Acura is confident that oneor more child seat models can fit andbe properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 29: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Placing a Child SeatThis page briefly summarizes Acura'srecommendations on where to placerear-facing and forward-facing childseats in your car.

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

The passenger's front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child's head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Front Passenger's SeatInfants: Never in the front seat, due

to the front airbag hazard.

Small children: Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page 32).

Back SeatsInfants: Recommended positions.

Secure a rear-facing child seatwith the seat belt (see page 28).

Small children: Recommendedpositions. Secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt (seepage 32).

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 30: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Installing a Child SeatAfter selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

1. Secure the child seat to the carwith a seat belt. All child seatsmust be secured to the car withthe lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the car can beendangered in a crash. See pages29 and 33 for instructions on howto secure child seats in this car.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured. After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be "rock solid." In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat's effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

3. Secure the child in the child seat.Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and seriously injured.

Storing a Child SeatWhen you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 31: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat TypeOnly a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby's head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker's weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

Rear-Facing Child Seat PlacementIn this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat. If the passenger'sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position. If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 32: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

1. With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker'sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 33: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 34: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby'sdoctor or follow the seat maker'srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page 12). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page 13).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

Additional Precautions for Infants• Never hold an infant on your lap.

If you are not wearing a seat beltin a crash, you could be thrownforward into the dashboard andcrush the infant.

If you are wearing a seat belt, theinfant can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and an infant. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into theinfant and cause very seriousinjuries.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 35: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat TypeA child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker's weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Child Seat PlacementIn this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag canbe hazardous. If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 36: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Child Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a forward-facing child seatwith this type of seat belt.

1. With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker'sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 37: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 38: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Additional Precautions for SmallChildren• Never hold a small child on your

lap. If you are not wearing a seatbelt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a30-lb (14 kg) child will become a900-lb (410 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

• Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause very serious injuries.

Protecting Larger ChildrenWhen a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until they are tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for childrenwho must sit in the front seat.

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 39: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page 15. Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child's collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child's neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck. This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm. This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 40: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Using a Booster Seat

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker's instructions.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger's frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild's head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child's body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 41: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physical SizePhysically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages 15 and 36). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

MaturityTo safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

• Carefully read the owner's manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

• Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

• Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

• Check that the child's seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

• Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 42: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Protecting Children

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints on the rear shelf for securinga tether-style child seat to the car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker's instructions.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 43: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System ComponentsYour seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver's seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

Lap/Shoulder Belt

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 44: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver's have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages 29 and 33 for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page 15 for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 45: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt MaintenanceFor safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

U.S. ModelsAcura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Acura will repair orreplace any seat belt componentthat fails to function properlyduring normal use.Please see your Acura WarrantyInformation booklet for details.

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page 249.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 46: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Front Airbags

SRS ComponentsYour Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

• Two front airbags. The driver'sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger's airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked "SRSAIRBAG."

• Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

• A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, driver andpassenger seat belt use, and allrelated wiring when the ignition isON (II)

• An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page 45).

• Emergency backup power in caseyour car's electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

How Your Front Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle's rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 47: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Front Airbags

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won'tinterfere with the driver's visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag's surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

U.S. OwnersFor additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags that came with yourowner's manual.

Canadian OwnersFor additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 48: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Front Airbags

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags or passenger's sideairbag automatic cutoff system (seepage 47).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light up brieflythen go out. This tells you that thesystem is working properly.

However, if the light comes on at anyother time, you should have thesystem checked by your dealer. Forexample:

• If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II)

• If the light stays on after theengine starts.

• If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, or your passenger's sideairbag automatic cutoff system maynot work properly. See your Acuradealer as soon as possible.

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags or cutoffsystem do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

Driver and Passenger Safety

SRS

Magesh
Page 49: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Side Airbags

Your car is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked"SIDE AIRBAG."

How Your Side Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver's or the passenger'sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger's side, the passenger'sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 50: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Side Airbags

How The Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works

The purpose of this light isto alert you if the

SIDEAIRBAG

passenger's side airbag has beenautomatically shut off.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, to helpprevent injury, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger's side airbag. This systemis designed to shut off the airbag if achild leans sideways and the child'shead is in the deployment path of theside airbag.

The side airbag may also shut off if asmall adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways, and the adult's head is inthe deployment path of the airbag.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If this light comes on, you shouldhave the passenger sit upright. Oncethe passenger is out of thedeployment path of the side airbag,the airbag will turn on and the lightwill go out.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator light should light upbriefly and go out (see page 55). If itdoesn't light, or it stays on or comeson without a passenger in the frontseat, have the system checked.

SRS The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your side airbags orthe automatic cutoff system (seepage 45).

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 51: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag ServiceYour front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour car serviced if:

• Your airbags ever inflate. Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Donot try to remove or replace anyairbag by yourself.This must be done by an Acuradealer or a knowledgeable bodyshop.

• The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem. Take your car to anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Additional Safety Precautions• Do not attempt to deactivate your

airbags. Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

• Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason. Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

• Do not expose the front seat-backsto water. If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

• Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer. Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

See page 154 for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Page 52: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle's exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

• The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

• You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

• The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car'sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

1. Push the button.2. Select the mode.3. Turn the fan on high speed.4. Set the temperature control to a

comfortable setting.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Magesh
Page 53: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

DASHBOARDUS models only

SUN VISORUS models

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur• Children 12 and under can be kited by the air bag• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS

Canadian models

HOOD

Accidental deployment can seriously hurt orkill you.Follow Service Manual instructions carefully.

Un deploiement accidental risque da causer de gravesUessures,volrehimortsuivre attentivement les instructions du manuel de reparation.

Driver and Passenger Safety

RADIATOR CAP

DANGERWARMING

NEVER OPEN WHEN HOT. 'Not c o o l a n t w i l l sca ld y o u .

N' OUYREZ PUS QUAND CHAUD.NIGHT BEI NEISSEH MOTOR OFFNEN.

WARNINGChildren Can Be KILLED or INJURED

by Passenger Air BagThe back seat is the safest place for children 12 and under.

Make sure all children use seat belts or child seats.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Page 54: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

Control Locations................... 52Indicator Lights........................ 53Gauges................................58

Speedometer........................ 58Tachometer.......................... 58Odometer.......................... 58Trip Meter............................. 59Temperature Gauge..................60Fuel Gauge............................60Maintenance Required

Indicator.......................... 60Controls Near the Steering

Wheel................................... 62Headlights..............................63Automatic Lighting Off

Feature........................... 64Daytime Running Lights............ 64

Instrument Panel Brightness ........64Turn Signals......................... 65Windshield Wipers.................65Windshield Washers............. 67Hazard Warning.......................67Rear Window Defogger............ 67Steering Wheel Adjustment....... 68

Steering Wheel Controls............. 69Cruise Control.........................69Remote Audio Controls 72

Keys and Locks.........................73Keys............................... 73Immobilizer System............... 74Ignition Switch.........................75Power Door Locks.................77Remote Transmitter.................78Childproof Door Locks.............. 81Trunk..................................82Glove Box ................................ 83

HomeLink UniversalTransmitter........................... 84

Seat Adjustments........................ 89Driver's Seat Full Power

Adjustments........................ 89Front Passenger's Seat

Adjustments.........................90

Driver's Lumbar Support........... 91Head Restraints...................... 91Center Console Armrest............92Rear Seat Armrest....................4 92Trunk Pass-through Cover........ 92

Seat Heaters........................... 94Power Windows........................... 95Moonroof...............................96Mirrors.................................97

Adjusting the Power Mirrors....... 98Parking Brake......................... 99Digital Clock...........................100Console Compartment................ 101Coin Box..................................101Armrest Storage

Compartments.......................102Beverage Holder........................ 103Sun Visor...............................104Vanity Mirror...........................104Sunglasses Holder.....................105Accessory Power Sockets.......... 105Interior Lights..........................106CD Holder................................ 107

Instruments and Controls

Page 55: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Control Locations

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCH(P.77)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.96)

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON(P.82)

FUEL FILL DOORHANDLE(P.147)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.148)

CLIMATE CONTROL(P. 110, 118)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.123)

Instruments and Controls

DIGITAL CLOCK(P.100)

MIRRORCONTROLS(P.98)

Page 56: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Indicator Lights

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

LOW OIL HIGH BEAM INDICATORPRESSUREINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCKBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

CHARGING DOOR-OPEN LOW FUELSYSTEM INDICATOR INDICATORINDICATOR

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM INDICATOR

BRAKE LAMPINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR*

* The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models arenoted in the text.

Instruments and Controls

MALFUNCTIONINDICATORLAMP

SEAT BELTREMINDERLIGHT

Page 57: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Light

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (IT). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

Low Oil PressureIndicator

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page 267.

Charging SystemIndicator

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page 268.

See page 269.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

U.S. Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

Canada

This light has two functions:

1. It lights as a reminder that youhave not released the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake applied can damage thebrakes and tires.

2. If it remains lit after you releasethe parking brake while the engineis running, or comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page 270.

Instruments and Controls

Page 58: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Indicator Lights

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags or passenger'sside airbag automatic cutoff system.For complete information, see page45.

Side Airbag Indicator

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger's sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page47.

U.S. Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Canada

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage 174.

Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

This indicator has three functions:

1. It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

2. It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

3. If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page175 for more information on the

TCS.

Instruments and Controls

Page 59: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Indicator Lights

Door-open Indicator

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page 237). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

"Daytime RunningLights" Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

High Beam Indicator

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page 63 forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page 64).

Instruments and Controls

Page 60: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Indicator Lights

CRUISECONTROL

Cruise Control Indicator

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page 69 for informationon operating the cruise control.

Low Fuel Indicator

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

BRAKELAMP

Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

If a brake light does not work, theBRAKE LAMP indicator comes onwhen you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch ON (II).A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage 74).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Washer Level Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page 212).

Instruments and Controls

Page 61: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Gauges

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TRIP METER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

MAINTENANCE TRIP METERREQUIRED INDICATOR OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR RESET BUTTON

SpeedometerU.S. ModelsThis shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

Canadian ModelsThis shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

TachometerThe tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

OdometerThe odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Instruments and Controls

ODOMETER

Page 62: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Gauges

Trip Meter

SELECTBUTTON

RESETBUTTON

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Selectbutton repeatedly. Each trip meterworks independently, so you cankeep track of two different distances.When you turn the ignition switchON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Reset buttonuntil the number resets to "0.0".Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle's battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

Outside Temperature IndicatorThis indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.models, and in Centigrade inCanadian models.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom the surrounding traffic. Thiscan cause the temperature readingnot to be correct when your speed isunder 19 mph (30 km/h).

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

Instruments and Controls

Page 63: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Gauges

Temperature GaugeThis shows the temperature of theengine's coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper red mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page 265 forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine's coolingsystem.

Fuel GaugeThis shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

Maintenance Required Indicator

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages 192 — 196.

Instruments and Controls

Page 64: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Gauges

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

SELECT BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Press and hold the select and resetbuttons on the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

3. Hold the buttons for about ten sec-onds, until the indicator resets.

Instruments and Controls

Page 65: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof, the tractioncontrol, and the cruise control.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

* To use the horn, press the padaround the "A" logo.

TRACTION HEADLIGHTS/ WINDSHIELD REAR WINDOWCONTROL TURN SIGNALS WIPERS/WASHERS DEFOGGER

MOONROOFSWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL TILT ADJUSTMENT HAZARD WARNING LIGHTSBRIGHTNESS

Instruments and Controls

Page 66: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Headlights

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the " " position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the" I "position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver's door.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page 56).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

Instruments and Controls

Page 67: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureThe Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver's door.This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the " "or " " position, remove the key,,

open, then close the driver's door

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver's door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver's dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The dial on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights. Turn the dialto adjust the brightness.

Instruments and Controls

Page 68: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Turn Signals

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

Windshield Wipers

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT : intermittent — : low speed — : high speed

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 69: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20km/h).

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

Instruments and Controls

Page 70: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Windshield Washers

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you'repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Hazard Warning

Push the red button to the right ofthe clock to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your car is disabled.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light above

defogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the car.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 71: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentSee page 17 for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

1. Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

3. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

4. Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Instruments and Controls

Magesh
Page 72: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Steeling Wheel Controls

Cruise ControlCruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

Using the Cruise Control

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH

1. Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Magesh
Page 73: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Steering Wheel Controls

RESUME/accel

3. Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set SpeedYou can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

• Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

• To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

Instruments and Controls

Page 74: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Steering Wheel Controls

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

• Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

CANCEL BUTTON

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

• Tap the brake pedal.

• Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

• Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 75: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Steering Wheel Controls

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel will go out and the car willbegin to slow down. You can use theaccelerator pedal in the normal way.The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) and thenpress the RESUME/accel buttonuntil the CRUISE CONTROL lightcomes on. The car will accelerate tothe same cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to Using theCruise Control

Remote Audio Controls

AUDIO/CHBUTTON

These buttons let you control somefunctions of the audio system with-out removing your hands from thewheel. Refer to page 141 for a com-plete explanation.

Instruments and Controls

Page 76: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Keys

KEY MASTERNUMBER KEYPLATE (BLACK)

VALET KEY(GREY)

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Glove box• Trunk pass-through cover

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk pass-throughcover, and glove box locked whenyou leave your car and the valet keyat a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your set of keys.You will need this number if youhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place.When replacing keys, use onlyAcura-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

• Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

• Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

• Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Remote TransmitterYour car also comes with two remotetransmitters; see page 78 for anexplanation of the operation.

Instruments and Controls

Page 77: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Immobilizer SystemThe Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine's starting circuit isdisabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey's coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

• Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

• Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

• Keep other keys away from yourcar's key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (ID to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourAcura dealer.

Instruments and Controls

Page 78: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Ignition Switch

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (IIP

LOCK (0) - You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. The shift levermust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 79: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

ACCESSORY (I) - In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

ON (II) — This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

START (III) - Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key's coding (see page74).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver's door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

Instruments and Controls

Page 80: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Power Door Locks

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the switchdown to lock all doors, and up tounlock them.

Each door also has a lock tab on thetop. To lock any door when gettingout of the car, push the lock tabdown and close the door. To lock allthe doors from the driver's door,push the lock tab down or push themaster switch down. Then close thedoor.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherfront door. To unlock only the driver'sdoor from the outside, insert the keyin the driver's door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, all doors will unlock. Allfour doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger's door with thekey.

Lockout PreventionIf you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver'sdoor. With the driver's door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver'sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger's door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver's door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger's door only locks that door.

Instruments and Controls

Page 81: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Remote Transmitter

LEDBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver's door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about10 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Instruments and Controls

PANICBUTTON

LOCK

Page 82: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if anydoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, the hornwill sound once to verify that thesecurity system will be set.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Panic ModePanic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car's security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

To cancel PANIC mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in ON (II).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 83: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Replacing the BatteryWhen the remote transmitter'sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

BATTERY

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same (+ sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

Instruments and Controls

Page 84: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includingInterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with mdustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Transmitter CareAvoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car's system byyour Acura dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Childproof Door Locks

LEVER

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

Instruments and Controls

Page 85: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

Trunk

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

You can open the trunk in threeways:

• Press the trunk release button onthe driver's door.

• Reach through the trunk pass-through and pull the trunk releasehandle.

• Press the trunk release button onthe remote transmitter.

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page 156 for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See CarbonMonoxide Hazard on page 49.

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

1. Disable the trunk release buttonon the driver's door by turning offthe trunk main switch in the glovebox.

Instruments and Controls

Page 86: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keys and Locks

2. Lock the glove box with themaster key. Make sure the trunkpass-through cover is locked (seepage 92).

3. Give the person the valet key.

Even if the trunk main switch isturned off, you can open the trunkwith the remote transmitter.

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Instruments and Controls

Glove Box

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Magesh
Page 87: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

The HomeLink Universa lTransmitter built into your car ca nbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home , such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

Customer AssistanceIf you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink UniversalTransmitter, or would likeinformation on home products thatcan be operated by the transmitter,call (800) 355-3515. On the internet,go to www.homelink.jci.com.

Important Safety PrecautionsAlways refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using thetransmitter, make sure you have aclear view of the garage door or gate,and that no one will be injured by itsmovement.

General InformationIf you are training the transmitter tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

The HomeLink transmitter storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainthe transmitter if your car's batterygoes dead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to program theHomeLink Universal Transmitter tooperate it. Garage door openersmanufactured before that date donot have a safety feature that causesthem to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

Instruments and Controls

Page 88: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

Training the TransmitterBefore you can use the HomeLinkUniversal Transmitter to operatedevices around your home, it must"learn" the proper codes. Forexample, to train the transmitter toopen and close the garage door:

Before you begin — If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons in theHomeLink transmitter before, youshould erase any previously learnedcodes before training the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransmitter until the red light flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed toStep 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

1. Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

2. Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 1 to 3inches from the HomeLinktransmitter. Make sure you arenot blocking your view of the redlight in the transmitter.

3. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

4. Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button on thetransmitter at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 89: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink Universal Transmitte

Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after tw oseconds. This is not long enough forthe HomeLink transmitter to learnthe code. Release and press thebutton on the remote control everytwo seconds until the transmitter haslearned the code.

5. The red light in the transmittershould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

6. When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. Thetransmitter should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

7. Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the transmitterbutton by pushing it. It shouldoperate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If it

still does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransmitter button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer's documentation.Go to "Training With a RollingCode System."

8. Repeat these steps to train theother two transmitter buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate ,security system, etc.).

Training With a Rolling CodeSystemFor security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a "rolling"or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed before theHomeLink transmitter can operatethe garage door opener.The 'Training the Transmitter"procedure trains the HomeLinktransmitter to the proper garagedoor opener code. The followingprocedure synchronizes theHomeLink transmitter to the garagedoor opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

Instruments and Controls

Page 90: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

1. Make sure you have properlycompleted the "Training theTransmitter" procedure.

2. Find the "Training" button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer's documentationmay help.

TRAINING BUTTON

3. Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

4. Press and release the button onthe HomeLink transmitter. (Thesame button you trained with the"Training the Transmitter"procedure.)

5. Press and release the HomeLinktransmitter button again. Thisshould turn off the training lighton the garage door opener unit.(Some systems may require you topress and release the button up tothree times.)

6. Press the transmitter button again.It should operate the garage door.

Instruments and Controls

Page 91: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink Universal Transmitter

Retraining a ButtonTo train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

1. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

2. Press and hold the transmitterbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

3. While continuing to hold thetransmitter button, place theremote control for the device 1 to3 inches from the HomeLinktransmitter.

4. Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

5. Release both buttons. Thetransmitter, should now be trainedto operate the device.

Erasing CodesTo erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Instruments and Controls

Page 92: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Seat Full PowerAdjustmentsSee pages 12 — 14 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall adjustments before you startdriving.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom'sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 93: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Adjustments

Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

Front Passenger's SeatAdjustments

The seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

Instruments and Controls

Page 94: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Lumbar Support

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Pivot the lever forwarduntil it stops, then let it return. Doingthis several times adjusts the lumbarsupport through its full range.

Head Restraints

RELEASE BUTTON

See page 14 for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant's head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Instruments and Controls

Page 95: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Adjustments

Center Console Armrest

The center console armrest can bemoved forward and backward.

Rear Seat Armrest

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

Trunk Pass-through Cover

KNOB

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

Instruments and Controls

Page 96: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Adjustments

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See Carbon Monoxide Hazard onpage 49.

Instruments and Controls

Page 97: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Seat Heaters

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat's temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

• Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

• Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger's seat-back.

Instruments and Controls

Page 98: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Power Windows

Your car's windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pushing the switch upand holding it. DRIVER'S WINDOW

SWITCHMAINSWITCH

The driver's door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers' win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it down until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close the window, pull back onthe window switch. Release theswitch when the window gets to theposition you want.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Closing a power window onsomeone's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Magesh
Page 99: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Power Windows, Moonroof

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

AUTO - To open the driver'swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

To open the driver's window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver's window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers' windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers' windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver's window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowsunintentionally.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

Moonroof

MOONROOF SWITCH

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Page 100: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Moonroof, Mirrors

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone's hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-freezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Closing the moonroof onsomeone's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore closing it.

NOTICE

Magesh
Page 101: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Mirrors

SENSORINDICATOR

AUTO SWITCH

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

SELECTOR SWITCH

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver'sdoor armrest:

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

2. Move the selector switch to L(driver's side) or R (passenger'sside).

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

3. Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up or down.

4. When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can'tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Instruments and Controls

Page 102: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Mirrors, Parking Brake

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Parking Brake

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake light on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running. (see page 54.)

NOTICEDriving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

Instruments and Controls

Page 103: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Digital Clock

Cars without Navigation SystemThe digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.

H M R

To set the clock:

1. Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredhour.

2. Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired minutes.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

• 1:06 would RESET to 1:00.

• 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Instruments and Controls

Page 104: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Console Compartment, Coin Box

Console Compartment

LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

To open the console compartment,pull up on the left lever and lift thelid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

LEVER

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theright lever and lift up the armrestpad.

Coin Box

COIN BOX

The coin box is located under theaudio system. To open the coin box,pull the bottom edge. Close it with afirm push.

Instruments and Controls

Page 105: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Armrest Storage Compartments

Small, lidded storage compartmentsare located in the armrest of thefront passenger's door, and in thearmrests of both rear doors. To opena compartment, pivot the lid up.

To remove a storage compartmentfor emptying, open the lid, thencarefully pull the compartmentstraight up and out of the armrest.

These storage compartments canalso be used as ashtrays. Make sureyou remove any flammable materialsfrom the compartment before usingit as an ashtray.

Instruments and Controls

Page 106: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Beverage Holder

To open the beverage holder, pushon the button. The beverage holderlid is spring-loaded and will swingopen. To close it, push either half ofthe lid closed.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Instruments and Controls

Page 107: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Vanity Mirror

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the headlight switch isin one of the on positions.

Instruments and Controls

Page 108: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Sockets

Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Accessory Power Sockets

To use an accessory power socket,pull the cover down. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Page 109: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Accessory Power Sockets, Interior Lights

COVERACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

Ceiling Light

DOOR ACTIVATED

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door. The lightfades out after all doors are closed.In the ON position, the ceiling lightstays on continuously.The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page 78).

Spotlights

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

Instruments and Controls

Page 110: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Interior Lights, CD Holder

Courtesy Lights

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT

Each door has a courtesy light. Thislight comes on when you open thedoor.Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver's door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

CD Holder

You can store up to four CDs in theCD holder. Push on the center of theholder to get it to pop out. Thenremove it by pulling it straight out.

Lift the lid to reach the storage trays.

Instruments and Controls

Page 111: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

108

Page 112: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Comfort and Convenience Features

The climate control system in yourAcura provides a comfortable drivingenvironment in all weather condi-tions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourAcura.

Climate Control System.................... 1103.2 TL without Navigation SystemFully-automatic Operation............ 112Semi-automatic Operation............ 113Rear Window Defogger

Button........................................ 116Sunlight Sensor/

Temperature Sensor............ 1173.2 TL with Navigation SystemFully-automatic Operation.......... 118Semi-automatic Operation.......... 119Rear Window Defogger

Button........................................ 122Audio System.............................. 123

Operating the Radio.................... 124Adjusting the Sound.................... 128Audio System Lighting.............. 129Radio Frequencies.................... 129Radio Reception.................... 129Operating the CD Player............ 131Operating the CD Changer............ 133Protecting Compact Discs.......... 134CD Player Error Indications.......... 135CD Changer Error

Indications.............................. 136

Operating the CassettePlayer........................................ 137

Tape Search Functions............ 138Caring for the Cassette

Player........................................ 140Remote Audio Controls............ 141Theft Protection...................... 142

Security System.............................. 143

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 113: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Acura picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard, and in back of thecenter console is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from each vent,move the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The side and rear vents can beopened and closed with the dials.

CENTER VENTS

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

DRIVER'S-SIDE VENT

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 114: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

PASSENGER'S-SIDE VENT

REAR VENTS DIAL

TABS

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 115: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

3.2 TL without Navigation SystemFully-automatic OperationTo put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system'sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FULL AUTO FAN CONTROL DIALDISPLAY

AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 116: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

Semi-automatic OperationYou can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonPress the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

TEMPERATURE AIR CONDITIONING BUTTONCONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 117: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Fan Control DialYou can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan's speed,which increases air flow.

MODE BUTTON FAN CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Mode ButtonUse the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes. Each time youpress the MODE button, the displayshows the mode selected. Press thebutton four times to see all themodes.

Some air will come out of the sidevents in all modes.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 118: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 119: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Ifthe control dial is in AUTO, the fanspeed increases automatically. If it isnot in AUTO, manually increase thefan speed or set the dial to AUTO.You can increase air flow to thewindshield by closing the side ventsin the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 67).

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 120: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 121: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

3.2 TL with Navigation SystemFully-automatic OperationTo put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Then setthe desired temperature by pressingeither side of the TEMP button:to raise the temperature above thedisplayed value, or to lower thetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

TEMPERATURE BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 122: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

Semi-automatic OperationYou can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Some of thesefunctions appear in the NavigationSystem display. Press the A/Cbutton next to the display to showthese functions.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonsPressing "ON" or "OFF" in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF activated in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside temperature. With theA/C on, use the temperature buttonto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

TEMPERATURE BUTTONS

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTONS

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

ON OFF

Page 123: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Fan Control IconsYou can manually select the fanspeed by pressing any of the fancontrol icons.

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

MODE ICONS

ON OFF

FAN CONTROL ICONS

Mode IconsUse the MODE icons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents and the side vents in all modes.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 124: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 125: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Climate Control System

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically, the systemselects Fresh Air mode, and the fanspeed increases. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshieldby closing the side vents in thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 67).

DEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 126: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

AM/FM/Cassette/CD StereoAudio SystemYour Acura's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle's battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page 142).

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 127: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON FM BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS

AM BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 128: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE - Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency andcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

SEEK - The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

SCAN - The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Preset — You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 129: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

AUTO SELECT - If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals; It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a "0"displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

A. SEL INDICATOR

A. SEL BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 130: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 131: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader — These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

Treble/Bass — Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 132: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage 64). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Radio FrequenciesYour Acura's radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as "FM101."

Radio ReceptionHow well your Acura's radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station's transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

A radio station's signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station's signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio's reception.

You may temporarily hear both

stations, or hear only the station youare close to.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

You may temporaily hear both

Page 133: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station's transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 134: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Operating the CD PlayerYou operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

CD SLOT SKIP BUTTONS

REPEAT BUTT CD BUTTON RDM BUTTON

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 135: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

REPEAT - To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

RANDOM PLAY - This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 136: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1—6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the FM orAM button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 137: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Protecting Compact Discs

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 138: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

CD Player Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Indication

CD

CD

CD

Cause

FOCUS/CLV Error

Data Read Error

Search Error

Mechanical Error

Control Error

LSI Error

Solution

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD

player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.

Check the disc for damage or deformation.

If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error

indication does not disappear after the disc is

ejected, see your Acura dealer.

Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Consult your Acura dealer.

Page 139: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while in CD mode, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error indication,take the vehicle to your Acura dealer.

Indication

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

CD

Cause

Disc-changer

malfunction.

Disc is in changer

mechanism.

Disc-changer

malfunction.

Disc-changer

malfunction.

CD magazine ejection

impossible.

High temperature.

Misconnection or

disconnection of CD

changer.

No CD magazine in the

CD changer.

No CD in magazine.

Solution

Consult your Acura dealer.

Press the magazine eject button, and insert an

empty magazine.

If the code disappears within a few seconds,

unit is OK. If it does not, consult your Acura

dealer.

Press the magazine eject button and pull out

the magazine, check for error indication. Insert

the magazine again. If the magazine can not be

pulled out, consult your Acura dealer.

Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-

zine does not eject, consult your Acura dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns to

normal.

See your Acura dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD in magazine.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 140: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Operating the Cassette PlayerThe cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

PLAYBUTTON

FF BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

REWBUTTON

PROG BUTTON CD BUTTON

Page 141: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the NR button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AM,FM or CD button. To change back tothe cassette player, push the TAPEbutton.

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW - Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 142: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

SKIP — The skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

REPEAT - The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind.When it senses the beginning of thesame song or passage, the systemreturns to PLAY mode. It willcontinue to repeat this sameprogram until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of selection.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 143: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Caring for the Cassette PlayerThe cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 144: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Remote Audio ControlsAUDIO/CHBUTTON

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up or downPress the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system's front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see "FF"blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 145: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Audio System

Theft ProtectionYour vehicle's audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system's codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system's serial number inthis Owner's Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourAcura dealer. To do this, you willneed the system's serial number.

If your vehicle's battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see "Code" in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code. Ifit is entered correctly, the radio willstart playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 146: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Security System

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver's doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page 56), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Page 147: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

144

Page 148: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

Break-in Period..................... 146Gasoline.............................. 146Service Station Procedures.......... 147

Filling the Fuel Tank................ 147Opening the Hood.................. 148

Oil Check............................ 150Engine Coolant Check......... 151

Fuel Economy........................... 152Vehicle Condition.................... 152Driving Habits.......................... 152

Accessories and Modifications..... 153Carrying Cargo........................... 155

Before Driving

Page 149: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Break-in PeriodHelp assure your car's futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

• Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

• Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

GasolineYour Acura is designed to operate onpremium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional, metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will resultin decreased engine performance.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car's emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emissions control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Acura dealer for service.

Before Driving

Page 150: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Station Procedures

Filling the Fuel Tank

1. Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver's side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

2. Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle at the outside of thedriver's seat.

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

• Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.

• Handle fuel only outdoors.• Wipe up spills immediately.

FUEL FILL CAP

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

Magesh
Page 151: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Station Procedures

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to "top off' the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel pumpkeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage 54).

6. Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Opening the Hood

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

1. Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Before Driving

Page 152: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Station Procedures

LATCH

2. Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the Ieft untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, orthe hood latch handIe movesstiffly or does not spring back asbefore, the mechanism should becleaned and lubricated (see page215).

3. Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

Page 153: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

DIPSTICK

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

2. Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Before Driving

Page 154: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Station Procedures

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

4. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see Adding Oil on page 201.

Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see AddingEngine Coolant on page 206 forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer to Owner MaintenanceChecks on page 199 for informationon checking other items in yourAcura.

Before Driving

MAX

Page 155: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuel Economy

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Vehicle ConditionAlways maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the Owner MaintenanceChecks (see page 199). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more "rolling resistance,"which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car's underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

Driving HabitsYou can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to"warm-up" a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of "cold starts," try tocombine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Before Driving

Page 156: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

AccessoriesYour dealer has Genuine Acuraaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Acura accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car'shandling and stability. (See"Modifications" on the page 154 foradditional information.)

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar's handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car'scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car's electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Before installing any accessory:

• Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

• Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page 275).

• Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before Driving

Magesh
Page 157: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Accessories and Modifications

ModificationsDo not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car's anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Additional Safety Precautions• Do not attach or place objects on

the airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked "SRS AIRBAG," in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

• Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door. If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

• Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Acuraseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

Before Driving

Page 158: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Carrying Cargo

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-back, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car's handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Before Driving

Page 159: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Carrying Cargo

Load LimitThe maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

• Add up the weight of all occupants.

• If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

• Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment• Store or secure all items that could

be thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

• Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

• Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver's ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

• Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

Before Driving

Magesh
Page 160: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack• Distribute cargo evenly on the

floor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

• If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thehatch, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page 49 .

• If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight.Please contact your Acuradealer for further information.

Cargo Net

CARGO NET

TRUNK NET HOOK

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it tobuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons.

When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the pocket in the leftside of the trunk.

Before Driving

Page 161: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

158

Page 162: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Driving

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your car, the braking system,the Traction Control System, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

Preparing to Drive.................... 160Starting the Engine.................... 161

Starting in Cold Weatherat High Altitude................. 161

Automatic Transmission........... 162Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 162Shift Lever Positions............. 163Engine Speed Limiter............ 169Shift Lock Release.............. 169

Parking................................... 171The Braking System................. 172

Brake Wear Indicators.......... 172Brake System Design.............. 173Anti-lock Brakes.................... 173

Important SafetyReminders................... 174

ABS Indicator.................... 174Traction Control System........... 175

TCS ON/OFF Switch............. 176TCS Indicator....................... 176

Driving in Bad Weather............. 178Towing a Trailer........................ 180

Driving

Page 163: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

2. Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

3. Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

4. Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat(see page 12).

6. Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage 97).

7. Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page 17).

8. Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page 15).

10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

11. Start the engine (see page 161).

12. Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage 53).

Driving

Page 164: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

3. Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

5. If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

6. If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

1. Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

2. Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

Driving

Page 165: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Your Acura's transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a "lock-up" torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

This indicator in the tachometershows which position the shift leveris in. The illuminated number next tothe "D5" indicator shows you thegear you have selected in theSequential SportShift mode.

The "D5" indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapidacceleration and have thetransmission checked by anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible.

Driving

Page 166: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Positions

SHIFT LEVER

SEQUENTIALSPORTSHIFTMODEPOSITION

The shift lever has nine positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD5, D4, D3, 2, 1,N,R,or theSequential SportShift mode, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and keepyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

To select the Sequential SportShiftmode, slide the shift lever toward theleft from the "D5" position.In this mode the shift lever allowsyou to shift up and down manually.

To shift from:P toR

R to NN to DsD5 to D4

D4 to D3

D3 to22 to l1to2

2 to D3

D3 to D4

D4 to D5

N to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

Whenever you move the shift lever,slide it along the guide on theconsole.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal depressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 167: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Park (P) - This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the right to shift out of thePark position.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page169.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Reverse (R) - To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift.

Your car has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 7 — 9 mph (12 — 14km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe car is stopped, press the brakepedal and slowly shift to Neutralthen to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle'sbattery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto Shift Lock Release on page 169).

Driving

Page 168: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Neutral (N) - Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Drive (D5) — Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for your speed andacceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

Sequential SportShift Mode - Withthe shift lever in "D5" position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftmode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

When the Sequential SportShiftMode is selected, the transmissionwill automatically upshift anddownshift between first and secondgear.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, slide the shift lever further tothe left. To return to "D5", slide theshift lever to the right.

When you move the shift lever from"D5" to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

Downshift

In the Sequential SportShift mode,each time you push forward on theshift lever, the transmission shifts toa higher gear. Pull back on the leverto downshift. The number of thegear selected is displayed next to the"D5" indicator (see page 162).

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 169: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will start infirst gear and then automaticallyupshift to second gear. You have tomanually upshift between secondand fifth gears. Make sure youupshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer's red zone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5,4,3). There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

Driving on level roads and downhill

To shift from

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 18 mph(29 km/h)

under 31 mph(50 km/h)

Driving uphill

To shift from

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 34 mph(55 km/h)

under 47 mph(75 km/h)

Driving

Page 170: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing or provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 9 mph (15 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

If the car speed slows to below theredline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

If the transmission temperature isbelow 14 °F (-10 °C), you may notbe able to use the SequentialSportShift mode.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

CONTINUED

Driving

To shift from

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 9 mph(15 km/h)

over 18 mph(29 km/h)

over 31 mph(50 km/h)

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 60 mph(96 km/h)

under 93 mph(150 km/h)

under 140 mph(225 km/h)

Page 171: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D4, D3) — These positionsare similar to D5, except when youselect the D4 position, only the firstfour gears are selected. When youselect D5, only the first three gearsare selected. D4 can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenfourth and fifth gears in stop-and-godriving, and D3 can keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears.

Use D3 when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D3gives you more power and increasedengine braking.

For faster acceleration when in D3D4 or D5, you can get thetransmission to automaticallydownshift by pushing the acceleratorpedal to the floor. The transmissionwill shift down one or two gears,depending on your speed.

Second (2) — This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

Driving

Page 172: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

First (1) - With the lever in thisposition, the transmission locks inFirst gear.

If you shift into First position whenthe vehicle speed is above 31 mph(50 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto Second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer'sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine'scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Shift Lock ReleaseThis allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedurealso releases the Reverse Lockout.

1. Set the Parking brake.

2. Make sure the key is in theignition switch OFF (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the key is in theACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 173: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Automatic Transmission

COVER

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry off theedge of the cover.

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

4. Insert a screwdriver in the shiftlock release slot

5. Push down on the screwdriver andmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then Park.

6. Remove the screwdriver from theshift lock release slot, then installa new cover.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

Driving

Page 174: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Parking

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe car from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission — making iteasier to move the shift lever out ofPark when you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Parking Tips• Make sure the moonroof and the

windows are closed.

• Turn off the lights.

• Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

• Check the indicator on the driver'sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

• Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Driving

Page 175: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Braking System

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Brake Wear IndicatorsAll four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic"screeching" sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible "screeching."

Driving

Page 176: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Braking System

Brake System DesignThe hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Front

Anti-lock BrakesYour car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

You should never pump thebrake pedal, this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as"stomp and steer."

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 177: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Braking System

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle, it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly, such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability. Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

ABS Indicator

ABS INDICATOR

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage 55). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

Driving

Page 178: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Traction Control System

Your Acura is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 18mph(30km/h).

The TCS monitors the speed of allfour wheels. When it senses a frontwheel losing traction, it appliesbraking to that wheel. The TCSindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle's wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

TCS INDICATOR

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign the TCSis activating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page 254) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

If the brakes overheat while the TCSis activating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that the TCS systemhas turned off. After the brakes havecooled down (usually for about 10minutes), the TCS will turn back onand the indicator will turn off.

Driving

Page 179: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Traction Control System

TCS ON/OFF Switch

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

TCS IndicatorThe TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

• When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II)

• When you manually turn off theTCS.

• It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

• If the system's diagnostics sensesa problem in the TCS, the indica-tor will come on and stay on.

Driving

Page 180: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Traction Control System

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the TCS inspected byyour Acura dealer. You can still drivethe vehicle without TCS.

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see ABS Indicator on page174).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the Brake System indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see Brake SystemIndicator on page 54).

Driving

Page 181: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Driving in Bad Weather

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Driving Technique — Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving

Page 182: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility — Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages 112 and 118).

Traction — Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing "hydroplaning" (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. "Clear" roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Driving

Page 183: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Your Acura has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Load Limits• Total Trailer Weight: The total

weight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450kg).Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle'shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

• Tongue Load: The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenreadjust the load as needed.

Driving

Page 184: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:4,430 lbs (2,010 kg)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)on the front axle

2,050 lbs (930 kg)on the rear axle

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Checking LoadsThe best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Driving

Magesh
Page 185: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessoriesTowing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it Will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

HitchesAny hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Safety ChainAlways use a safety chain. Makesure that it is secured to both thetrailer and hitch, and that it crossesunder the tongue so it can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chain drag on the ground.

Driving

Page 186: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Trailer BrakesHonda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle's hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle's hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Trailer Lights

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

Your car has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the leftside panel in the trunk. Refer to thedrawing above for the wiring colorcode and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your car fromyour Acura dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified technicianinstall a suitable connector betweenthe vehicle and the trailer.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 187: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Additional Trailer EquipmentMany states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don't,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Pre-Tow ChecklistWhen preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

• The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

• All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages 180 and 181).

• The hitch, safety chain, and anyother attachments are secure.

• All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

• The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

• Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page 254),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Driving

Page 188: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safety With a TrailerThe added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle's handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Towing Speeds and GearsDrive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D5 or D4 positions whentowing a trailer on level roads. D3 isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See "Driving on Hills" in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

Making Turns and BrakingMake turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Driving on HillsWhen climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the transmission shifts frequentlybetween 4th and 5th gears whilegoing up a hill, shift to D4. And if thetransmission shifts frequentlybetween 3rd and 4th gears, shift toD3.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not "ride" the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

CONTINUED

Driving

Page 189: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing a Trailer

Handling Crosswinds and BuffetingCrosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Backing UpAlways drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the bottom of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

ParkingFollow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer'stires.

Driving

Page 190: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage 297 for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

Maintenance Safety .................................188Important Safety Precautions......189

Maintenance Schedule.......................... 190Maintenance Record............................ 197Owner Maintenance Checks.............. 199Fluid Locations.................................... 200Engine Oil...................................... 201

Adding Oil................................ 201Recommended Oil...................... 201Synthetic Oil................................ 203Additives.................................. 203Changing the Oil and Filter.......... 203

Cooling System............................ 206Adding Engine Coolant............ 206Replacing Engine Coolant........ 208

Windshield Washers.................... 212Transmission Fluid...................... 213

Automatic Transmission.......... 213Brake Fluid................................ 214

Brake System.......................... 214Power Steering............................ 215Hood Latch.................................. 215Air Cleaner Element.................. 216Spark Plugs................................ 217

Replacement............................ 217Specifications............................ 219

Battery.......................................... 220Wiper Blades.............................. 223Air Conditioning System.............. 225Air Conditioning Filter................ 226Drive Belts.................................... 226Timing Belt................................ 227Tires............................................ 227

Inflation................................ 228Inspection................................ 229Maintenance............................ 230Tire Rotation............................ 231Replacing Tires and Wheels..... 231Wheels and Tires.................... 232Winter Driving...................... 233

Snow Tires.......................... 233Traction Devices.................. 233

Lights........................................ 234Replacing Bulbs...................... 236

Storing Your Car........................ 243

Maintenance

Page 191: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance Safety

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner'smanual.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by an Acuratechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner'smanual.

Maintenance

Magesh
Magesh
Page 192: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety PrecautionsBefore you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

• Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust. Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

• Burns from hot parts. Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

• Injury from moving parts. Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance

Page 193: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance Schedule

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

• Avoid exceeding your car's loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver's doorjamb.

• Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

• Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

• Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page146).

Which Schedule to Follow:Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor "Severe Conditions" if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor "Normal Conditions."

Maintenance

Page 194: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance Schedule

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of GenuineAcura parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Cars:Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are "certified" to EPAstandards.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith # will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance

Page 195: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Mai

nten

ance

Sch

edul

e fo

r N

orm

al C

ondi

tions

Service at the indicateddistance or time — whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt*1, and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace transmission fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filter*2

Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Adjust only if noisy

••

•••

••

••

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Visually inspect the following items:Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connections#Exhaust system#Fuel lines and connections

U.S. OwnersFollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlyOCCASIONALLY drive under a"severe" condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Canadian OwnersFollow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 191.

* 1: See Timing Belt on page 227 to determine need for replacement.

* 2: See Air Conditioning Filter on page 226 for replacement information under special conditions.

Maintenance

• • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • •

Page 196: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance S

chedule for Norm

al Conditions (listed by distance/tim

e)

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C as required for each distance/time interval. Follow thisschedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.Canadian owners: Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.

NOTE:• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, if noisy.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page 191.

* 1 : See Timing Belt on page 227 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : See Air Conditioning Filter on page 226 for replacementinformation under special conditions.

Maintenance

7,500 mi/12,000 km/1 yr15,000 mi/24,000 km/-22,500 mi/36,000 km/1½, yrs30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km/2½ yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

52,500 mi/84,000 km/3½ yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km/4½yrs75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km/5½ yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs

97,500 mi/156,000 km/6½ yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km/7½ yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace coolant. Replace brake fluid.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace coolant. Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid. Replace transmissionfluid. Do items in A, B, C.

Do items in A. Replace timing belt*1, inspect water pump. Replace coolant. lnspect valve clearance. Check idle speed. Replace spark plugs.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

A Replace engine oil. Rotate tires (follow pattern on paqe 231 ).

B Replace engine oil filter. Inspect front and rear brakes. Check parking brake adjustment. Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots. Inspect suspension components. Inspect driveshaft boots. Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks.# Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.# Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect fuel lines and connections.C Replace air cleaner element.

Inspect and adjust drive belts. Replace air conditioning filter.*2

Page 197: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service at the indicated

distance or time — whichever

comes first.

miles x 1,000

km x 1,000months

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Check engine oil and coolantClean (o) or replace ( • ) air cleaner element

Use normal schedule except in dusty conditons

Inspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugs

Replace timing belt*1-*, and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive belts

Inspect idle speed

Replace engine coolantReplace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluid

Check parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filter*2

Lubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

15

2412

304824

45

72

36

60

96

48

75

12060

90144

72

105

16884

120

19296

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

O • O • O •

Adjust only if noisy

••

••

O •

Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

••

••

••

••

•Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Visually inspect the following items:Tie rod ends, steering gear box,Suspension componentsDriveshaft boots

and boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and conditions of fluidsCooling system hoses and connections'Exhaust system'Fuel lines and connectionsLights and controlsVehicle underbody

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

U.S. OwnersFollow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your vehicle MAINLYunder one or more of thefollowing conditions:

• Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.

• Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32° C)] conditions.

• Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.

• Trailer towing, driving with aroof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.

• Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Canadian OwnersFollow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 191.

* 1: See Timing Belt on page 227 to determine need for replacement.

* 2: See Air Conditioning Filter on page 226 for replacement information under special conditions.

Maintenance

Mai

nten

ance

Sch

edul

e fo

r N

orm

al C

ondi

tions

• • • • • • • •

Page 198: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Use this schedule if your vehicle is MAINLY driven in any of the following Severe Conditions, or normally driven in Canada; otherwise use the NormalSchedule. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C, D as required for each distance/time.

3,750 mi/6,000 km/-7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos11,250 mi/18,000 km/-15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr18,750 mi/30,000 km/-22,500 mi/36,000 km/1½ yrs26,250 mi/42,000 km/-30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km/-37,500 mi/60,000 km/2½ yrs41,250 mi/66,000 km/-45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

48,750 mi/78,000 km/-52,500 mi/84,000 km/3½ yrs56,250 mi/90,000 km/-60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

63,750 mi/102,000 km/-67,500 mi/108,000 km/4½ yrs71,250 mi/114,000 km/-75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

78,750 mi/126,000 km/-

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A. CIean air cleaner element. Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A. Replace coolant. Replace brake fluid. CIean air cleaner element. Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.' Replace timing belt*1, inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A. Replace coolant, Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

NOTE:• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, if noisy.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Severe Conditions:• Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing

temperatures, driving less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.• Driving in extremely hot (over 90°F/32°C) conditions.• Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.• Trailer towing, driving with a roof rack, or driving in

mountainous conditions.• Driving, on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

AB

• Replace engine oil and filter. Inspect front and rear brakes. Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 231 ). Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.

Inspect suspension components. Inspect driveshaft boots.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page 191.

* 1 : See Timing Belt on page 227 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : See Air Conditioning Filter on page 226 for replacementinformation under special conditions.

Maintenance S

chedule for Norm

al Conditions (listed by distance/tim

e)

Page 199: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

NOTE:• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, if noisy.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page 191.

* 1: See Timing Belt on page 227 to determine need for replacement.

* 2: See Air Conditioning Filter on page 226 for replacementinformation under special conditions.

Maintenance

82,500 mi/132,000 km/5½ vrs86,250 mi/138,000 km/-90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 vrs93,750 mi/150,000 km/-97,500 mi/156,000 km/6½ yrs101,250 mi/162,000 km/-105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km/-112,500 mi/180,000 km/7½yrs116,250 mi/186,000 km/-120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A, B.Do items in A. Replace brake fluid. Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A. Replace timing belt*1, and inspect water pump. Replace coolant. Check idle speed. Clean air cleaner element. Replace sparkplugs. Inspect valve clearance.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A. Replace timing belt*1, inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

C Check parking brake adjustment. Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches.• Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.

#Inspect exhaust system.•' #Inspect fuel lines and connections. Check all lights. Inspect the underbody. Replace air cleaner element.

• Inspect and adjust drive belts.• Replace transmission fluid.• Replace air conditioning filter*2.

Mai

nten

ance

Sch

edul

e fo

r N

orm

al C

ondi

tions

(lis

ted

by d

ista

nce/

time)

Page 200: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 192) or severeconditions (page 194). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

3,750 mi6,000 km

7,500 mi12,000 km(or 6 mo)

11,250 mi18,000 km

15,000 mi24,000 km(or 1 year)

18,750 mi30,000 km

22,500 mi36,000 km(or 1½ years)

26,250 mi42,000 km

30,000 mi48,000 km(or 2 years)

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

33,750 mi54,000 km

37,500 mi60,000 km(or 2½ years)

41,250 mi66,000 km

45,000 mi72,000 km(or 3 years)

48,750 mi78,000 km

52,500 mi84,000 km(or 3½ years)

56,250 mi90,000 km

60,000 mi96,000 km(or 4 years)

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 201: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

63,750 mi102,000 km

67,500 mi108,000 km(or 4½ years)

71,250 mi114,000 km

75,000 mi120,000 km(or 5 years)

78,750 mi126,000 km

82,500 mi132,000 km(or 5½ years)

86,250 mi138,000 km

90,000 mi144,000 km(or 6 years)

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

93,750 mi150,000 km

97,500 mi156,000 km(or 6½ years)

101,250 mi162,000 km

105,000 mi168,000 km(or 7 years)

108,750 mi174,000 km

112,500 mi180,000 km(or 7½ years)

116,250 mi186,000 km

120,000 mi192,000 km(or 8 years)

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Maintenance

Page 202: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Owner Maintenance Checks

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

• Engine oil level — Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage 150.

• Engine coolant level — Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page 151.

• Windshield washer fluid — Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page 212 .

• Automatic transmission — Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page213.

• Brakes — Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page 214 .

• Tires — Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page229.

• Lights — Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage 234.

Maintenance

Page 203: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fluid Locations

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

Maintenance

Page 204: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine Oil

Adding Oil

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and replace theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Recommended OilOil is a major contributor to yourengine's performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade deter-gent oil. It is highly recommendedthat you use Genuine Honda MotorOil in your vehicle for as long as youown it.

You can determine an oil's SAEviscosity and Service Classificationfrom the API Service label on the oilcontainer.

A fuel-efficient oil is recommendedfor your Acura. This is shown on theAPI Service label by the words"Energy Conserving." This oil isformulated to help your engine useless fuel.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 205: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine Oil

The API Service label also tells youthe service classification of the oil.Always use an oil that is labeled "APIService SJ." This service rating mayinclude other classifications, such asCD. These additional classificationsare not a problem, as long as thelabel also carries the SJ classification.

API SERVICE LABEL

The oil container may also displaythe API Certification seal. Make sureit says "For Gasoline Engines."

API CERTIFICATION MARK

The SAE numbers tell you the oil'sviscosity or weight. Select the oil foryour car according to this chart.

Ambient Temperature

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 ispreferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourAcura. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F(-7°C).

Maintenance

Page 206: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine Oil

Synthetic OilYou may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for conventional motor oil:energy conserving, a serviceclassification of SJ, and the properweight as shown on the chart. Whenusing synthetic oil, you must followthe oil and filter change intervalsgiven in the maintenance schedule.

AdditivesYour Acura does not need any oiladditives. Purchasing additives forthe engine or transmission will notincrease your car's performance orlongevity. It only increases the costof operating your car.

Changing the Oil and FilterAlways change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1. Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 207: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine Oil

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

2. Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

OIL FILTER

3. Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required to remove thefilter.

4. Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:29 lbf-ft (39N-m, 4.0 kgf-m)

Maintenance

Page 208: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine Oil

6. Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

8. Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9. Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 209: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

Adding Engine Coolant

RESERVE TANK

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

Always use Genuine HondaAntifreeze/Coolant. If it is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Maintenance

Page 210: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RADIATOR CAP

1. Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

3. Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Magesh
Page 211: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

4. The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

RESERVE TANK

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car's coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

Replacing Engine CoolantThe cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useGenuine Honda Antifreeze/Coolant.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

Maintenance

Page 212: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

1. Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial to maximum heat (climatecontrol to 90°F/32°C). Turn offthe ignition. Open the hood. Makesure the engine and radiator arecool to the touch.

2. Remove the radiator cap.

DRAIN PLUG

DRAIN BOLT

3. Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Loosen the drainbolt at the rear of the enginecylinder block.

RESERVE TANK CAP RESERVE TANK

HOLDER

4. Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

5. When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 213: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

6. Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:7 Ibf-ft(10N-m,1.0kgf-m)

7. Mix the recommended antifreezewith an equal amount of purifiedor distilled water in a cleancontainer. The cooling systemcapacity is:1.48 US gal (5.6 i, 1.23 Imp gal)

8. Pour coolant into the radiator upto the base of the filler neck. Startthe engine and let it run for about30 seconds. Then turn off theengine. Pour coolant into theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck.

9. Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

10.Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Maintenance

Page 214: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Cooling System

11.Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiatorcooling fan comes on at least twice.Then stop the engine.

12.Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

13.Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

14.Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

15.If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Maintenance

Page 215: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Windshield Washers

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the headlight.

Check the reservoir's fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

Canadian ModelsThe low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page57).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

NOTICEDo not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your car's paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer fluid.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Maintenance

Page 216: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

DIPSTICK

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1. Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda Premium FormulaAutomatic Transmission Fluid(ATF). If it is not available, youmay use a DEXRON® IIIautomatic transmission fluid as atemporary replacement. However,continued use can affect shiftquality. Have the transmissiondrained and refilled with HondaATF as soon as it is convenient.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

Page 217: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Brake Fluid

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3brake fluid. If it is not available, youshould use only DOT 3 or DOT 4fluid, from a sealed container, as atemporary replacement. However,the use of any non-Honda brake fluidcan cause corrosion and decreasethe life of the system. Have thebrake system flushed and refilledwith Honda DOT 3 brake fluid assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car's brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Maintenance

Page 218: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Power Steering, Hood Latch

Power Steering

MAX

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Always use Genuine Honda PowerSteering Fluid. If it is not available,you may use another power steeringfluid as an emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Turning the steering wheel to full leftor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Hood Latch

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts, including the pivot.Follow the time and distancerecommendations in theMaintenance Schedule. If you arenot sure how to clean and grease thelatch, contact your Acura dealer.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 219: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Air Cleaner Element

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Acura dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

ReplacementThe air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver'sside of the engine compartmentTo replace it:

BOLTS

1. Loosen the four bolts and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

2. Remove the old air cleanerelement.

3. Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

4. Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

Maintenance

Page 220: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Spark Plugs

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Replacement

1. Remove the cover on the frontcylinder bank by turning the twoclips one quarter turncounterclockwise.

2. Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

3. Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 221: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Spark Plugs

4. Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out

5. Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket

6. Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

7. Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:13 Ibf-ft(18N-m,1.8kgf-m)

Maintenance

Page 222: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Spark Plugs

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

8. Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

9. Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

10.Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

11.Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank.

Specifications:

NGK:DENSO:

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:0.04 in (1.1 mm)

Maintenance

NOTICE

+0—0.1 mm

Page 223: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Battery

Check the condition of your car'sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Remove the battery cover.Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator's colors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Maintenance

Page 224: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Battery

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative (—) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car'selectrical system.

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Magesh
Page 225: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Battery

If your car's battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see "Code" inthe frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page 142 ).

The Navigation System will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to theNavigation System Owner's Manual.

NOTICECharging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar's electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables before connecting thebattery to a charger.

Maintenance

Page 226: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

WIPER ARMS

To replace the blade:

1. Turn the ignition ON (II), switchthe wipers to INT or — lowposition), then turn the ignitionOFF when the wiper arm isapproximately midway in its travel.

2. Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

LOCK TAB

3. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 227: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Wiper Blades

BLADE

4. Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

5. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

6. Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

7. Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

8. Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)and return the windshield wipersto their park position.

Maintenance

Page 228: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Air Conditioning System

Your car's air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine'sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

The condenser and radiator fins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor soft-bristle brush to clean them.

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page282.)

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicefacility uses a refrigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures therefrigerant for reuse. Releasingrefrigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

Maintenance

NOTICE

NOTICE

Page 229: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Air Conditioning FilterThe air conditioning filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-mal conditions. It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-pow-ered vehicles. Replace it more oftenif air flow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.Have the air conditioning filter re-placed by your Acura dealer.

Drive Belts

POWER STEERING BELT

Check the condition of the two drivebelts. Examine the edges of eachbelt for cracks or fraying.Check the tension of the powersteering belt by pushing on it withyour thumb midway between thepulleys.The belt should have the following"play" or deflection.

Power steering belt:0.51 -0.65 in (13.0-16.5 mm)

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Maintenance

Page 230: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Timing Belt, Tires

Timing BeltThe timing belt should normally bereplaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 Ion (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

• In very high temperatures(over 110° F, 43° C).

• In very low temperatures(under -20°F, -29°C).

TiresTo safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Maintenance

Magesh
Page 231: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

InflationKeeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Over-inflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered"cold" if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm2) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Maintenance

Page 232: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal DrivingThe following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

Tire Size

P205/60R1691V

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm2)

The compact spare tire pressure is:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver's doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

InspectionEvery time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

• Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

• Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

• Excessive tread wear.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 233: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Your car's tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

MaintenanceIn addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car'soriginal tires were dynamic or "spin"balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car's aluminum wheels. Use onlyGenuine Acura wheel weights forbalancing.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 234: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

Tire Rotation

Front

(For Non-directional (For DirectionalTires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare "directional." This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Replacing Tires and WheelsThe tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire's sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Front

Page 235: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner's manual.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car's handling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure you use an identical stylealuminum alloy wheel that originallycame on your Acura. Replacementwheels are available at your Acuradealer.

Wheels and TiresWheel:16x61/2JJ

Tire:P205/60R16 91V

See page 284 for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

Maintenance

Magesh
Page 236: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tires

Winter DrivingTires that are marked "M+S" or"All Season" on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Snow TiresIf you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car's handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car's

original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommen-dations.

Traction DevicesMount traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Installthem only on the front tires.

Because your Acura has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE class "S"cable-type traction devices.

Link-type "chains" should not beused. No matter how tight they seemto be installed, they can come intocontact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing traction devices,follow the manufacturer'sinstructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withthem installed. If you hear themcoming in contact with the body orchassis, stop and investigate. Makesure the traction devices areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brakes orsuspension.Remove them as soon as you startdriving on cleared roads.

Cables that are the wrong size orimproperly installed can damage yourcar's brake lines, suspension, body, andwheels. Stop driving if they are hittingany part of the car.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 237: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

Check the operation of your car'sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar's visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM

Maintenance

Page 238: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

BACK-UP LIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

TURN SIGNALLIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT STOP/TAILLIGHT PARKING LIGHT

Check the following:

• Headlights (low and high beam)• Parking lights• Taillights• Brake lights• High-mount brake light• Turn signals• Back-up lights• Hazard light function• License plate light• Side marker lights• Daytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page 283 todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Maintenance

Page 239: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

Replacing a Headlight BulbThe low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thecar to your dealer to have it replaced.

Halogen bulbs are used for the highbeam headlight bulbs. Whenreplacing a high beam headlight bulb,handle it by its base and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

BULB

TAB

1. Open the hood.If you need to change a bulb onthe driver's side, remove theradiator reserve tank.

2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Page 240: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

3. Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

4. Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

5. Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

6. Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

7. Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker Light Bulbs1. If you are changing the bulb on

the driver's side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger's side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

HOLDING CLIP

2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

3. Pull the inner fender away fromthe fender and bumper.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 241: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

4. Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning counterclockwise until itunlocks.

6. Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

8. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

9. Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

CARGO NET MOUNTINGBUTTON

FASTENER

1. Open the trunk.

Remove the fastener on the edgeof the trunk opening by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin.Unscrew the cargo net mountingbutton. Pull the lining back.

Maintenance

Page 242: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

2. Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal light, back-up light

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocketPush the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

5. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

6. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal

8. Put the fastener in the hole on theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

9. Screw the cargo net mountingbutton back into the hole.

Maintenance

Page 243: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

1. Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

2. Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket

3. Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket Make sure the newbulb is working.

Replacing a Rear License Bulb

1. Use a small phillips screwdriver toremove the lens from the licenseplate light assembly.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out Push the new bulbinto the socket

3. Reinstall the lens.

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLightsThe ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way, but they do not use thesame type of bulb.

Maintenance

Page 244: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

1. Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Door light:Pry on the top middle of the lens.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlights:Pry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

CEILING LIGHT

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

SPOTLIGHT

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Page 245: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Lights

DOOR LIGHT SUN VISOR LIGHT

TRUNK LIGHT

1. Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

4. Push the cover back in place.

Maintenance

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Page 246: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Storing Your Car

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

• Fill the fuel tank.

• Change the engine oil and filter(see page 203).

• Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

• Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

• Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

• Block the rear wheels.

• If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

• Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

• Disconnect the battery.

• Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

• To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

• Cover the car with a "breathable"cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

• If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Acura dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page 192). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

Maintenance

Page 247: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

244

Page 248: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Appearance Care

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Acura helps to keep it "new"looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

Exterior Care.................................... 246Washing...................................... 246Waxing........................................ 247Aluminum Wheels...................... 247Paint Touch-up.......................... 247

Interior Care.................................. 248Carpeting.................................... 248Vinyl............................................ 248Leather........................................ 248Seat Belts.................................... 249Windows...................................... 249Air Fresheners............................ 249

Corrosion Protection...................... 250Body Repairs................................ 251

Appearance Care

Page 249: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Exterior Care

WashingFrequent washing helps preserveyour car's beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner'sManual.

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

• Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

• Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

• Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

• Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

• When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page 247).

Appearance Care

NOTICE

Page 250: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Exterior Care

WaxingAlways wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes — A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Acurawhen it is new.

Polishes — Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Acura ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Aluminum WheelsClean your Acura's aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Paint Touch-upYour dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car's color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver's doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Appearance Care

Page 251: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Interior Care

CarpetingVacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

VinylRemove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

LeatherVacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

Appearance Care

Page 252: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Interior Care

Seat Belts

LOOP

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

WindowsClean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

The rear window defogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Air FreshenersIf you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Appearance Care

NOTICE

Page 253: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Corrosion Protection

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

1. Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

2. Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Acura. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

• Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

• Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

• Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

• Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

• Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Appearance Care

Page 254: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Body Repairs

Body repairs can affect your car'sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesGenuine Acura replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Acura body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Genuine Acura parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Take your car to your authorizedAcura dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Appearance Care

Page 255: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

252

Page 256: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

Compact Spare Tire.................... 254Changing a Flat Tire.................. 255If Your Engine Won't Start............ 260

Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor OperatesVery Slowly...................... 261

The Starter OperatesNormally.......................... 262

Jump Starting............................ 262If Your Engine Overheats.............. 265Low Oil Pressure Indicator.......... 267Charging System Indicator........ 268Malfunction Indicator Lamp........ 269Brake System Indicator.............. 270Closing the Moonroof.............. 271Fuses.............................................. 272

Checking and Replacing.......... 273Emergency Towing...................... 277

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 257: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Compact Spare Tire

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put back onyour car as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

• This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

• Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

• The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 258: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

HOOK

SPARE TIRE TOOL BOX

1. Park the car on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.To keep the trunk floor out of theway, attach the hook into the slotin the trunk lid.

4. Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5. The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

TRUNK FLOOR

JACK

Magesh
Page 259: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire

6. The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

JACK

7. Turn the jack's end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

WHEEL NUTS

8. Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Faking Care of the Unexpected

Page 260: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire

JACKING POINT

9. Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

WHEEL WRENCH

10. Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.Placing the wheel face down couldmar its finish.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

EXTENSION

Page 261: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire

BRAKE HUB

12. Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

13. Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

14. Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 262: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire

15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:80 lbf.ft(108N.m,11 kgf.m)

16. Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

WING BOLTCONE

17. Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

18. Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

19. Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

SPACER

Page 263: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won't Start

20. Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack's end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack and toolssecurely before driving.

21. Store the center cap in the trunk.Make sure it does not get scratch-ed or damaged.

22. Unclip the hook from the trunk lidand lower the trunk floor.

23. Close the trunk lid.

If Your Engine Won't StartDiagnosing why your engine won'tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

• You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine's startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

• You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Magesh
Page 264: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If Your Engine Won't Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very SlowlyWhen you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

• Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don't light at all,the battery is discharged. SeeJump Starting on page 262.

• Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (SeeEmergency Towing on page 277.)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page 220). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page 262).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 265: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If Your Engine Won't Start, Jump Starting

The Starter Operates NormallyIn this case, the starter motor'sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

• Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page 74).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

• Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to Starting theEngine on page 161.

• Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

• There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page 273).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See EmergencyTowing on page 277.

Jump StartingIf your car's battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

You cannot start your Acura bypushing or pulling it.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Magesh
Page 266: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Jump Starting

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

1. Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page 220). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

NOTICEIf a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze.Attempting to jump start with a frozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

2. Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.

3. Remove the battery cover.

4. Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the positive (+) terminalon your Acura's battery.

5. Connect the second jumper cableto the negative (—) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 267: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Jump Starting

6. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

7. Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

8. Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BOOSTERBATTERY

Page 268: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If Your Engine Overheats

The pointer of your car's tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the car orengine cover. In either case, youshould take immediate action.

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the climate control and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

2. If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Magesh
Page 269: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If Your Engine Overheats

4. If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

5. Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see EmergencyTowing on page 277).

7. If you don't find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page151). If the level is below the

MIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

8. If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

9. Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

10. Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

11. Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See EmergencyTowing on page 277.)

12. If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Magesh
Page 270: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn offthe engine as soon as you can safely getthe car stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

2. Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page 150). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

3. If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page 201).

4. Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See EmergencyTowing on page 277.)

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 271: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Charging System Indicator

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 272: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine's emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourcar's performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourcar to put out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes three drivingtrips.

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car's emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car's warranties.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 273: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Brake System Indicator

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

The Brake System Indicator lightcomes on when you turn the ignitionON (II). If the parking brake is notset, it goes off after you start theengine. If the parking brake is set, itgoes off when you fully release theparking brake with the enginerunning.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car'sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page 214). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system's dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See EmergencyTowing on page 277.)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 274: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Closing the Moonroof

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

1. Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page 276). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

2. Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

3. Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

ROUND PLUG

4. Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

SOCKET

5. Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

6. Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 275: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuses

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in three fuse boxes.

INTERIOR

The interior fuse boxes are locatedon each side of the dashboard. Toopen an interior fuse box, open thecar door. Pull the bottom of thecover open, then take it out of itsside hinges by pulling it toward you.

UNDER-HOOD

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger's side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

TAB

Page 276: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuses

Checking and Replacing FusesIf something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages275 and 276, or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component'soperation.

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

2. Remove the cover from the fusebox.

BLOWN

3. Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

FUSE PULLER

4. Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 277: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuses

BLOWN

5. Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment fuse with the proper rating for thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

6. If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see "Code" in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page142).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 278: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuses

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXNo.

12

3456

7891011

Amps.

20 A-

20 A20 A

20 A15 A

-

30 A15 A

120 A20 A

Circuits Protected

Left HeadlightNot UsedRight Headlight

ABS F/SStopACG

Spare FuseABS Motor

HazardBatteryCooling Fan

No.

12131415

161718192021

Amps.

30 A40 A

-

40 A

20 A40 A40A50 A

15 A20 A

Circuits Protected

Back Up, ACCPower Window MotorSpare FusePower Seat

TCSHeater Motor

Rear DefrosterIG1 MainSmall Light

Condenser Fan

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 279: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOXESDRIVER'S SIDE

No.

1

234

56

7

89

1011

12

13

Amps.

15 A10 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

15 A

7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A

7.5 A15 A30 A7.5 A

Circuits Protected

Fuel PumpSRSHeater ControlMirrorDaytime Running Lights*ECU (ECM/PCM), Cruise

ControlSRSACCInstrument Panel, Back-up

Lights, MoonroofIG1 Turn SignalsIG1 CoilWiper, WasherStarter Signal

PASSENGER'S SIDE

* : On Canadian models

No.

12

34

567

8910

11

12

131415

16

Amps.

30 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

20 A20 A20 A

20 A10 A

7.5 A

20 A7.5 A

7.5 A20 A20 A

Circuits Protected

MoonroofPower Seat ReclineHeated SeatDriver's Power Seat

Assistant Power SeatSeat ReclineRear Left Power WindowFront Right Power Window

ACC (Radio)Navigation System, DaytimeRunning Lights*Interior Light, CourtesyLights

Power Door LocksClockABS Motor Check

Driver's Power WindowRear Right Power Window

* : On Canadian models

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Page 280: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Emergency Towing

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment:

Flat-bed Equipment — The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.This is the best way to transportyour Acura.

Wheel-Lift Equipment — The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground. This isan acceptable way to tow yourAcura.

Sling-type Equipment — The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car's suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.This method of towing isunacceptable.

If your Acura cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

• Release the parking brake.• Start the engine.• Shift to D5, then to N.• Turn off the engine.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshift the transmission or start theengine, your car must be transportedwith the front wheels off the ground.

• With the front wheels on theground, it is best to tow the car nofarther than 50 miles (80 km), andkeep the speed below 35 mph (55km/h).

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Page 281: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Emergency Towing

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsfreely before you begin towing.

Trying to lift or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car's weight.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

NOTICE

Page 282: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Technical Information

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. The explana-tions of several electronic andmechanical systems on your Acuraare for the more technically-orientedowner.

Identification Numbers.............. 280Specifications................................ 282DOT Tire Quality Grading............ 284

Treadwear................................ 284Traction................................... 284Temperature................................ 285

Oxygenated Fuels...................... 286Driving in Foreign Countries................ 287Emissions Controls...................... 288

The Clean Air Act...................... 288Crankcase Emissions Control

System................................ 288Evaporative Emissions Control

System................................ 288Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery.............................. 288Exhaust Emissions Controls.... 289

PGM-FI System...................... 289Ignition Timing Control

System................................ 289Exhaust Gas Recirculation

(EGR) System.................... 289Three Way Catalytic

Converter.............................. 289Replacement Parts.................... 289

Three Way Catalytic Converter... 290

Technical Information

Page 283: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Identification Numbers

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver's side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver's doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Technical Information

Page 284: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Identification Numbers

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Technical Information

Page 285: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Specifications

DimensionsLengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack Front

Rear

192.9 in (4,900 mm)70.3 in (1,785 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)108.1 in (2,745 mm)61.2 in (1,555 mm)60.4 in (1,535 mm)

Capacities

WeightsGross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached

to the driver's doorjamb.

Air ConditioningRefrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a(R-134a)25-27 oz (700-750 g)

ND-OIL8

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Change*1

TotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

1.48 US gal (5.6 l ,1.23 Imp gal)1.98 US gal (7.5 l ,1.65 Imp qal)

4.6 US qt (4.4 l ,3.9 Imp qt)

4.2 US qt (4.0 l , 3.5 Imp qt)

5.3 US qt (5.0 l , 4.4 Imp qt)3.1 US qt (2.9 l , 2.6 Imp qt)7.6 US qt (7.2 l , 6.3 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 l , 2.2 Imp qt)4.8 US qt (4.5 l ,4.0 Imp qt)

CapacitiesFuel tank Approx.

17.17 US gal (65.0 l ,14.30 Imp gal)

* 1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 l , 0.13 Imp gal)

* 2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Technical Information

Page 286: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Specifications

LightsType

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

AlignmentToe-in

Camber

Caster

TiresSize

Pressure

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)

195.8 cu-in (3,210 cm3)9.8: 1

See spark plug maintenancesection page 219.

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°-0°30'3°00'

P205/60R16 91VT135/80R16

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm2)60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Technical Information

Headlights*Front turn signal/Side markerlightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightTrunk lightsDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightMap light

12 V - 60 W(HB3) (High beam)12 V - 24/2.2 CP

12V - 21 W12 V - 21/5 W12V - 21 W12V - 21 W12 V - 3CP12V - 7W12V - 5W12 V - 2CP12V - 1.1 W12 V - 4CP

* Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

Battery

FusesInterior

Under-hood

See page 276 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 275 or the fuse boxcover.

Capacity12 V - 65 AH/20 HR

Engine

Page 287: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1-1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Technical Information

Page 288: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Technical Information

Page 289: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Oxygenated Fuels

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel's contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name "Gasohol."

MTBE (Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

METHANOL (methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

Technical Information

Page 290: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Driving in Foreign Countries

Technical Information

If you are planning to take yourAcura outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Acura will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Page 291: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your car'sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical "smog." Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The Clean Air ActThe United States Clean Air Act*sets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page192.

* In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystemYour car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine'scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystemAs gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

Onboard Refueling VaporRecoveryThe Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Technical Information

Page 292: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions ControlsThe exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine's combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

PGM-FI SystemThe PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

Ignition Timing Control SystemThis system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)SystemThe Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterThe three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen(N2), and water vapor.

Replacement PartsThe emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

Technical Information

Page 293: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic convertercontains platinum, palladium andrhodium. These metals serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine's per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car's three way catalyticconverter.

• Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

• Keep the engine tuned-up.

• Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, continuing to run after youturn off the engine, stalling, orotherwise not running properly.

Technical Information

Page 294: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer RelationsInformation................................ 292

Canada Zone Office Map............ 293Warranty Coverages.................... 294Reporting Safety Defects

(U.S. Cars)................................ 295Authorized Manuals...................... 297

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 295: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Customer Relations Information

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership's management. TheSendee Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership'smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:Acura Automobile Division

Client Services OfficeAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

or telephone: (800) 382-2238

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816(787) 2504327

Canadian Owners:Refer to the Canadian Zone OfficeMap on the next page.

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

• Vehicle Identification Number(see page 280)

• Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

• Date of purchase• Mileage on your vehicle• Your name, address, and tele-

phone number• A detailed description of the

problem• Name of the dealer who sold the

vehicle to you

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 296: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Canada Zone Office Map

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTELE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416)287-4776

Honda Canada Inc.National Office

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 297: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Warranty Coverages

U.S. OwnersYour new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

New Car Limited Warranty — coversyour new vehicle, except for thebattery, emissions control systemsand accessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty — these twowarranties cover your vehicle's emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty — this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty — a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty— all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty —Genuine Acura Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty — covers all GenuineAcura replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty — provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty — providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2000 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura's originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Canadian OwnersPlease refer to the 2000 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 298: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cars)

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition

Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Page 299: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

296

This page left intentionally blank

Page 300: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

PublicationForm Number

61S0K01

61S0K01EL

61S0K30

31S0K610

31S0K710

ACU-R

Form Description

1999-2000 Acura 3.2 TLService Manual

1999-2000 Acura 3.2 TLElectrical Troubleshooting Manual

1999-2000 Acura 3.2 TLBody Repair Manual

2000 Acura 3.2 TLOwner's Manual2000 Acura 3.2 TL

Navigation ManualOrder Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PriceEach*$64.00

$42.00

$40.00

$35.00

$27.00

FREE

* Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact diet authorized Acura dealer.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. - 6:00 P.M. EST

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00OR

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

NameYearQty

Price

Each*

Total

* Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

TOTAL MATERIAL

Mich. PurchasesAdd 6% Sales Tax

HANDLING CHARGE $6.00

GRAND TOTAL

Page 301: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Authorized Manuals

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

Customer Name

Street Address - No P.O. Box NumberApartment Number

State & Zip Code

Daytime Telephone Number( ).

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc — U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

P.O. BOX 07280-DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207-1-800-782-4356

Service Manual:This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

Body Repair Manual:This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Page 302: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Accessories and Modifications...... 153Accessories..................................... 153Additional Safety Precaution...... 154Modifications............................. 154

ACCESSORY (Ignition KeyPosition)....................................... 76

Accessory Power Socket................... 105Adding

Automatic TransmissionFluid....................................... 213

Brake Fluid....................................... 214Engine Coolant............................. 206Engine Oil....................................... 201Power Steering Fluid................... 215Windshield Washer Fluid........... 212

Additional Information AboutYour Airbags............................. 48

Additional Safety Precautions...... 48Airbags Service............................. 48

Additional Information AboutYour Front Airbags................... 43

How Your Front AirbagsWork....................................... 43

How Your SRS Indicator LightWorks....................................... 45

SRS Components............................. 43Additional Information About

Your Seat Belts............................. 40Lap/Shoulder Belts..................... 40Seat Belt Maintenance................... 42Seat Belt System Components... 40

Additional Information AboutYour Side Airbags................... 46

How the Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works............................. 47

How Your Side Airbags Work.... 46Additives, Engine Oil................... 203Adjustments

Mirrors....................................... 94Head Restraints............................. 91Seats......................................... 89Steering Wheel............................. 68

Airbag (SRS)....................................... 9Air Cleaner Element................... 216Air Conditioning............................. 110

Maintenance............................. 225Usage.................................. 112, 118

Air Conditioning Filter................... 226Air Pressure, Tires................... 228

Alcohol in Gasoline................... 286Antifreeze....................................... 206Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Description............................... 173Indicator Light...................... 55, 174Operation....................................... 173

Anti-theft Steering Column Lock.. 75Appearance Care............................. 245Audio System............................... 123Automatic Speed Control............. 69Automatic Transmission................... 162

Capacity, Fluid............................. 282Checking Fluid Level................... 213Shifting.......................................... 162Shift Lever Position Indicator.. 162Shift Lever Positions................... 163Shift Lock Release................... 169

A

B

BatteryCharging System Light................... 268Jump Starting............................. 262Maintenance............................. 220Specifications............................. 283

CONTINUED

Page 303: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Before Driving................................ 145Belts, Seat........................................ 8Beverage Holder.............................. 103Body Repair................................ 251

Anti-lock System (ABS).................... 173Break-in, New Linings.................... 146Fluid.......................................... 214Light, Burned-out.................... 238Parking........................................ 99System Indicator...................... 54Wear Indicators...................... 172

Brakes, ABSDescription................................ 173Operation........................................ 173System Indicator................... 55, 174

Braking System.............................. 172Break-in, New Car.............................. 146Brightness Control, Instruments..... 64Brights, Headlights...................... 63Bulb Replacement

Back-up Lights.............................. 238Brake Lights.............................. 238Ceiling Light.............................. 241Courtesy Light.............................. 241Front Side Marker Lights.......... 237

Headlights................................ 236High-mount Brake Light.............. 240License Plate Lights.................... 240Specifications.............................. 283Spotlight........................................ 241Turn Signal Lights.................... 237

Bulbs, Halogen.............................. 236

Changing Engine Coolant.......... 208Charging System Indicator.... 54, 268Checking

Automatic TransmissionFluid........................................ 213

Battery Condition...................... 220Brake Fluid................................ 214Drive Belts.............................. 226Engine Coolant...................... 151Engine Oil................................ 150Fuses........................................ 273Power Steering Fluid.................... 215

Checklist, Before Driving.......... 199Cleaner, Air................................ 216Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels.................... 247Carpeting.................................. 248Exterior.................................... 246Interior........................................ 246Seat Belts................................ 249Vinyl.......................................... 248Window........................................ 249

Climate Control System.......... 112, 118Clock, Setting the...................... 100CO in the Exhaust.................... 49Coin Box........................................ 101

C

Cables, Jump Starting With.......... 262Capacities Chart................................ 282Carbon Monoxide Hazard............. 49Carrying, Cargo................................ 155Cassette Player

Care.......................................... 140Operation........................................ 137

CAUTION, Explanation of................ iiCD Changer........................................ 133CD Player........................................ 131Certification Label.............................. 280Chains.................................................. 233Change Oil

How to........................................ 203When to........................................ 192

Changing a Flat Tire.................... 255

Brakes

Page 304: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Cold Weather, Starting in.................... 161Compact Spare.............................. 254Console Compartment.................... 101Consumer Information*.................... 292Controls, Instruments and.................... 52Coolant

Adding.......................................... 206Checking........................................ 151Proper Solution...................... 206Temperature Gauge.................... 60

Corrosion Protection.................... 250Crankcase Emissions Control

System........................................ 288Cruise Control Operation............ 69Customer Relations Office............ 292

Dimming the Headlights.................... 63Dipstick

Automatic Transmission.................... 213Engine Oil........................................ 150

Directional Signals...................... 65Disabled, Towing Your Car If.......... 277Disc Brake Wear Indicators............ 172Disposal of Used Oil.................... 205Doors

Power Door Locks...................... 77DOT Tire Quality Grading............... 284Drive Belts........................................ 226Driver and Passenger Safety............ 5Driving.................................................. 159

Economy........................................ 152In Bad Weather...................... 178In Foreign Countries.................... 287

Checking the Fuses.................... 272Low Oil Pressure Indicator.......... 267Malfunction Indicator Lamp.... 269Manually Closing Moonroof.... 271Overheated Engine.................... 265

Emergency Brake.............................. 99Emergency Flashers...................... 67Emissions Controls...................... 288Engine

Belts.......................................... 226Coolant Temperature Gauge.......... 60Malfunction Indicator

Lamp................................ 54, 269Oil Pressure Indicator.......... 54, 267Oil, What Kind to Use............ 201Overheating.............................. 265Specifications.............................. 283

Ethanol in Gasoline.................... 286Evaporative Emissions Controls.. 288Exhaust Fumes.............................. 49Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

Belts by........................................ 18Exterior, Cleaning the.................... 246

CONTINUED

D

DANGER, Explanation of............ iiDashboard... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 52Daytime Running Lights.......... 64Dead Battery, What to Do.......... 262Defects, Reporting Safety.......... 295DEXRON® in Automatic

Transmission Fluid.................. 213Dimensions.......................... 282

E

Economy, Fuel.......... 152Emergencies on the Road.......... 253

Battery, Jump Starting.......... 262Brake System Indicator.......... 270Changing a Flat Tire.......... 255Charging System Indicator.......... 268

Page 305: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Fan, Interior............................... 114, 120Features, Comfort and

Convenience.............................. 109Filling the Fuel Tank...................... 147Filter

Air Conditioning........................... 226Oil.................................................. 203

First Gear, Shifting...................... 169Flashers, Hazard Warning.......... 67Flat Tire, Changing a.................... 255Fluids

Automatic Transmission............ 213Brake.......................................... 214Power Steering.............................. 215Windshield Washer.................... 212

FM Stereo RadioReception........................................ 129

Foreign Countries, Driving in.......... 287Four-way Flashers......................... 67Front End, Towing by

Emergency Wrecker.................... 277Fuel.................................................. 146

Fill Door and Cap...................... 147Gauge........................................ 60

Octane Requirement.................... 146Oxygenated................................ 286Tank, Filling the...................... 147

Fuses, Checking the.................... 272

Headlights........................................ 63Automatic Lighting Off.................... 64Daytime Running Lights.................... 64High Beam Indicator.................... 56High Beams, Turning on.................... 63Low Beams, Turning on.................... 63Reminder Chime...................... 63Replacing Halogen Bulbs.......... 236Turning on................................ 63

Head Restraints.......................... 91High Altitude, Starting at.................... 161High-Low Beam Switch.................... 63HomeLink Universal

Transmitter........................................ 84Hood, Opening the...................... 148Hot Coolant, Warning about.......... 207Hydroplaning........................................ 178

F

G

Gas Mileage, Improving.................... 152Gasohol.................................................. 286Gasoline.................................................. 146

Gauge.................................................. 60Octane Requirement.................... 146Tank, Filling the.............................. 147

Gas Station Procedures.................... 146Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature....... 60Fuel.................................................. 60

Gearshift Lever PositionsAutomatic Transmission.................... 162

Glass Cleaning.............................. 249Glove Box........................................ 83

H

Halogen Headlight Bulbs.................... 236Hazard Warning Flashers............ 67

I

Identification Number, Vehicle............. 280If Your Car Has to be Towed.......... 277Ignition

Keys.................................................. 73Switch.......................................... 75Timing Control System.................... 289

Page 306: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Immobilizer System.............................. 74Important Safety Precautions.......... 6Indicator Lights, Instrument

Panel.................................................. 53Infant Restraint........................................ 28Inflation, Proper Tire.............................. 228Inside Mirror........................................ 97Inspection, Tire................................ 229Instrument Panel.............................. 53Instrument Panel Brightness........... 64Interior Cleaning.............................. 248Interior Lights................................ 106Introduction........................................ i

Label, Certification.............................. 280Lane Change, Signaling.................... 65Lap/Shoulder Belts.............................. 40Leaking of Exhaust into Car............ 49Lights

Bulb Replacement...................... 236Indicator........................................ 53Parking........................................ 54Turn Signal........................................ 56

LOCK (Ignition Key Position)............ 75Locks

Anti-theft Steering Column............. 75Fuel Fill Door........................................ 147Glove Box........................................ 83Power Door........................................ 77Trunk.................................................. 82

Low Coolant Level.............................. 206Low Oil Pressure Indicator....... 54, 267Lubricant Specifications Chart...... 282Luggage.................................................. 155

Maintenance........................................ 187Owner Maintenance Checks.............. 199Record........................................ 197Required Indicator.............................. 60Safety........................................ 188Schedule.............................. 19 2 - 196

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.......... 269Meters, Gauges.............................. 58Methanol in Gasoline.................... 286Mirrors, Adjusting.............................. 97Moonroof.......................................... 96

Closing Manually...................... 271Operation........................................ 96

CONTINUED

J

K

L M

N

Neutral Gear Position.................... 165New Vehicle Break-in.................... 146NOTICE, Explanation of.................... iNumbers, Identification.................... 280

Jacking up the Car...................... 255Jack, Tire........................................ 255Jump Starting................................ 262

Keys.................................................. 73

Page 307: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

O

Octane Requirement, Gasoline.............. 146Odometer........................................ 58Odometer, Trip.............................. 59Oil

Change, How to.............................. 203Change, When to...................... 192Checking Engine...................... 150Pressure Indicator.................. 54, 267Selecting Proper Viscosity

Chart........................................ 202ON (Ignition Key Position)............ 76Opening the Hood........................ 148Operation in Foreign Countries... 287Outside Mirrors................................ 98Overheating, Engine...................... 265Owner Maintenance Checks.......... 199

Parking Over Things that Burn... 290PGM-FI System.............................. 289Polishing and Waxing.................... 247Power

Door Locks................................ 77Mirrors.......................................... 97Steering........................................ 215Windows........................................ 95

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist............ 11Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts.......... 18Protecting Adults.............................. 12

Additional Safety Precautions.... 19Advice for Pregnant Women.......... 18

Protecting Children.............................. 20Protecting Infants...................... 28Protecting Larger Children.......... 35Protecting Small Children.......... 32Using Child Seats with

Tethers........................................ 39

Rear Seat Armrest.................... 92Rear View Mirror.................... 97Rear Window Defogger................. 67Reclining the Seat Backs.......... 90Reminder Lights.............................. 53Remote Transmitter...................... 78Replacement Information

Air Cleaner Element.................... 216Coolant........................................ 208Engine Oil and Filter.................... 203Fuses........................................ 273Light Bulbs.............................. 236Schedule........................................ 192Spark Plugs.............................. 217Tires.................................................. 231Wiper Blades.............................. 223

Replacing Seat Belts After aCrash.......................................... 42

Reserve Tank, Coolant.................... 151Restraint, Child.............................. 20Reverse Gear Position.................... 164Rotation, Tire................................ 231

P

Panel Brightness Control.................... 64Park Gear Position...................... 164Parking.......................................... 171Parking Brake................................ 99Parking Lights..................................... 63

R

SRadiator Overheating.................... 265Radio/Cassette Sound System...... 123Rear End Towing.................... 277Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement.... 238 Safety Belts...................................... 8

Page 308: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Safety Defects, Reporting*.................... 295Safety Features................................ 7

Airbags.......................................... 9Door Locks.......................................... 10Head Restraints...................................... 10Seat Belts................................ 8Seats & Seat-Backs...................... 10

Safety Labels, Location of...................... 50Safety Messages................................ iiSeat Belt, Additional Information...... 40

Lap/Shoulder Belt...................... 40Seat Belt Maintenance............ 42Seat Belt System Components... 40

Seat Belts........................................ 8Cleaning........................................ 249Maintenance................................ 42Reminder Light and

Beeper........................................ 54System Components.................... 40Tether Attachment Points............ 39Use During Pregnancy.................... 18

Seats, Adjusting the...................... 89Security System................................ 143Serial Number.............................. 280Service Intervals.............................. 192Service Manual*.............................. 297

Service Station Procedures............ 146Setting the Clock...................... 100Shifting

The AutomaticTransmission.............................. 162

Shift Lever Position Indicator............ 162Side Airbags.................................... 9, 46Side Airbag Indicator.................... 47Side Marker Lights, Bulb

Replacement in.............................. 238Signaling Turns.............................. 65Snow Tires........................................ 233Solvent-type Cleaners.................... 246Sound System.............................. 123Spare Tire

Inflating........................................ 254Specifications.............................. 283

Spark Plugs, Replacing.................... 217Specifications Charts.................... 282Speed Control.............................. 69Speedometer................................. 58SRS, Additional Information.......... 43

Additional Safety Precautions.... 48How Your Airbags Work.......... 43How Your SRS Indicator

Works........................................ 45

SRS Components...................... 43SRS Service.............................. 48

SRS Indicator........................................ 45START (Ignition Key Position).......... 76Starting the Engine...................... 161

In Cold Weather at HighAltitude.......................................... 161

With a Dead Battery.................... 262Steam Coming from Engine.......... 265Steering Wheel

Adjustment................................ 68Anti-theft Column Lock.................... 75

Stereo Sound System.................... 123Storing Your Vehicle.................... 243Sun Visor........................................ 104Sunglasses Holder...................... 105Supplemental Restraint System

Servicing........................................ 48SRS Indicator.............................. 45System Components.................... 43

CONTINUED

T

Tachometer........................................ 58

Page 309: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Taillights, Changing Bulbs in.............. 238Taking Care of the Unexpected........ 253Tape Player........................................137Technical Descriptions

Driving in Foreign Countries....... 287Emissions Control Systems.......... 288Oxygenated Fuels....................... 286Three Way Catalytic

Converter.................................290Tire Information.............................. 284

Temperature Gauge......................... 60Tether Attachment Points................ 39Three Way Catalytic Converter........ 290Time, Setting the............................... 100Timing Belt........................................ 227Tire Chains...................................... 233Tire, How to Change a Flat....... 255Tires................................................ 227

Air Pressure................................ 228Checking Wear............................ 229Compact Spare.............................. 254DOT Tire Quality Grading.......... 284Inflation........................................228Inspection................................... 229Replacing................................... 231Rotating........................................ 231

Snow........................................ 233Specifications.............................. 283

Tools, Tire Changing......................... 255Towing

ATrailer........................................180Emergency Wrecker.................... 277

Traction Devices.............................. 233Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,Automatic.............................. 213

Fluid Selection.............................. 213Identification Number.................... 280Shifting the Automatic.................... 162

Treadwear............................. 229, 284Trip Meter........................................ 59Trunk.................................................. 82

Opening the........................................ 82Open Monitor Light...................... 56

Turn Signals........................................ 65

Unleaded Gasoline........................ 146Upholstery Cleaning...................... 248Used Oil, How to Dispose of........... 205

U

Underside, Cleaning.................... 250Unexpected, Taking Care

of the.......................................... 253Uniform Tire Quality Grading.......... 284

V

Vanity Mirror........................................ 104Vehicle Capacity Load.................... 156Vehicle Dimensions...................... 282Vehicle Identification Number.......... 280Vehicle Storage.............................. 243VIN.................................................. 280Vinyl Cleaning................................ 248Viscosity, Oil................................ 202

W

Warning BeepersKey in Ignition.............................. 76Seat Belts........................................ 54

WARNING, Explanation of................. iiWarning Labels, Location of.................... 50Warranty Coverages*...................... 294Washer, Windshield

Checking the Fluid Level.......... 212Operation................................67

Page 310: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Index

Washing........................................ 246Waxing and Polishing.................... 247Wheels

Adjusting the Steering.................... 68Alignment and Balance.................... 230Compact Spare.......................... 254

WindowsCleaning........................................ 249Operating the Power.................... 95Rear, Defogger.............................. 67

WindshieldCleaning........................................ 65

Wipers, WindshieldChanging Blades.............................. 223Operation........................................ 65

Worn Tires........................................ 229Wrecker, Emergency Towing............ 277

*: U.S. and Canada only

Page 311: 2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BT10000OM/enu/T...2000 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:17.17 US gal (65.0 l , 14.30 Imp gal)

Recommended Engine Oil:API Service SJ "EnergyConserving" oil, SAE 5W-30viscosity (see page 201).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):4.6 US qt (4.4 l , 3.9 Imp qt)

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Honda Premium FormulaAutomatic Transmission Fluidpreferred, or a DEXRON® III ATFas a temporary replacement (seepage 213).

Power Steering Fluid:Genuine Honda Power SteeringFluid preferred, or another brandof power steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page 215).

Brake Fluid:Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluidpreferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page 214).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm2)